1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1401–1440 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Hobby Room and Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio, built for daily backyard use.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space. Quilters, painters, ceramicists, and musicians use a 15×20 as a dedicated hobby room separate from the house. Vertical roof, full insulation, and.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room and Studio·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Vertical Roof
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-HOBBY-ROOM-STUDIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 hobby room and studio.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. 15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑15′ × 20′ · 300 ground + loft

Hobby Room and Studio layout.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space. Quilters, painters, ceramicists, and musicians use a 15×20 as a dedicated hobby room separate from the house. Vertical roof, full insulation, and wainscoting give the inside a finished feel, while two 15×20 windows pull in north light for studio work.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room and Studio works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room and Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room and Studio spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room and Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room and studio
Everyday hobby room and studio
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room and studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room and studio + seasonal storage
hobby room and studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 hobby room and studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room and Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room and Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room and Studio also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room and Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 hobby room and studio cost?

A 15×20 hobby room and studio from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 hobby room and studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room and studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 hobby room and studio?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room and studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 hobby room and studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 hobby room and studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 hobby room and studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 hobby room and studio.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 hobby room and studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 hobby room and studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 hobby room and studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 hobby room and studio typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room and Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

15×20 Pool House and Cabana

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Pool House and Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Pool House and Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Pool House and Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Pool House and Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners install a 15×20 as a pool house with French doors, a covered lean-to.

You’re viewing:Pool House and Cabana·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Lean-To Porch
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 pool house and cabana.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft ADU

Pool House and Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners install a 15×20 as a pool house with French doors, a covered lean-to porch, and an open changing area inside. The boxed-eave A-frame roof reads as residential, and the 17 standard colors let you match the home’s siding and trim.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House and Cabana works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Pool House and Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House and Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House and Cabana spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House and Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house and cabana
Everyday pool house and cabana
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house and cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house and cabana + seasonal storage
pool house and cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Pool House and Cabana, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 pool house and cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House and Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Pool House and Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Pool House and Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House and Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House and Cabana also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House and Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 pool house and cabana cost?

A 15×20 pool house and cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 pool house and cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house and cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 pool house and cabana?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house and cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 pool house and cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 pool house and cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 pool house and cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 pool house and cabana.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 pool house and cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 pool house and cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 pool house and cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 pool house and cabana typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House and Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

15×20 Pool House and Cabana

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal garage with roll-up door and a red sport bike parked on the driveway

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage, built for daily backyard use.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space. Homeowners with a half-acre or more use a 15×20 to store a zero-turn mower, push mower, snow blower, hand tools, and bagged fertilizer in one.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • Mezzanine Loft
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Gable Vents
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-MBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. 15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage layout.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space. Homeowners with a half-acre or more use a 15×20 to store a zero-turn mower, push mower, snow blower, hand tools, and bagged fertilizer in one organized space. Pegboard walls and a small mezzanine over the door deck out the interior for full lawn-equipment storage.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment and mower storage
Everyday lawn equipment and mower storage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment and mower storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment and mower storage + seasonal storage
lawn equipment and mower storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage cost?

A 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment and mower storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment and mower storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal garage with roll-up door and a red sport bike parked on the driveway

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,100

12

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,800$5,100SAVE $700
or $106/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Garden Shed with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Sliding barn doors on the gable end add curb appeal.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Lean-To·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,100$5,800Save $700
or as low as $106/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$5,100
15×25
longer
$6,200
16×20
wider
$5,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 6′ Lean-To
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylight
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-GARDEN-SHED-LEANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 garden shed with lean-to.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Lean-To layout.

Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Sliding barn doors on the gable end add curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Lean-To works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with lean-to
Everyday garden shed with lean-to
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
garden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$106/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 garden shed with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $106/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to cost?

A 15×20 garden shed with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $106/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $106/month on a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Job Site and Contractor Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and small-business owners use a 15×20 prefab building as a.

You’re viewing:Job Site and Contractor Storage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$6,300
15×25
longer
$7,400
16×20
wider
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Deadbolt Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-JOB-SITE-CONTRACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 job site and contractor storage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Job Site and Contractor Storage layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and small-business owners use a 15×20 prefab building as a secure on-site tool crib, materials cache, or rural-office mobile-anchored structure. 12-gauge framing and a 26-gauge roof handle daily abuse, and deadbolt-rated walk-in doors keep gear locked down.

💡 Pro tip:Job Site and Contractor Storage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Job Site and Contractor Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Job Site and Contractor Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Job Site and Contractor Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday job site and contractor storage
Everyday job site and contractor storage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a job site and contractor storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWjob site and contractor storage + seasonal storage
job site and contractor storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 job site and contractor storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Job Site and Contractor Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Job Site and Contractor Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Job Site and Contractor Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Job Site and Contractor Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 job site and contractor storage cost?

A 15×20 job site and contractor storage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 job site and contractor storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud job site and contractor storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 job site and contractor storage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud job site and contractor storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 job site and contractor storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 job site and contractor storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 job site and contractor storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 15×20 job site and contractor storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 job site and contractor storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 job site and contractor storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 15×20 job site and contractor storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Job Site and Contractor Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal garage with white raised-panel door and glazed entry in open countryside

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Single-Car Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 16×20 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Metal Garage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SINGLE-CAR-METALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 single-car metal garage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Single-Car Metal Garage layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 16×20 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of walk-around clearance and a workbench wall on one side. The 9-foot leg keeps the roll-up door at 16×20, clean fit for an F-150.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Metal Garage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car metal garage
Everyday single-car metal garage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car metal garage + seasonal storage
single-car metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 single-car metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 single-car metal garage cost?

A 16×20 single-car metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 single-car metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 single-car metal garage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 single-car metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 single-car metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 single-car metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 single-car metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 single-car metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 single-car metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 single-car metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 single-car metal garage typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal garage with white raised-panel door and glazed entry in open countryside

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with black trim and open bay revealing a workshop, pickup truck parked nearby

16×20 Metal Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Metal Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Metal Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 metal workshop.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Metal Workshop layout.

Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config. 320 sq ft holds a 10-foot bench, table saw, drill press, and rolling tool chests with floor space left to swing 8-foot stock. Add a walk-in door and two 16×20 windows for natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Metal Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop
Everyday metal workshop
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop + seasonal storage
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Metal Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Metal Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 metal workshop cost?

A 16×20 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 metal workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 metal workshop?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 metal workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 metal workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 metal workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 metal workshop.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 metal workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 metal workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 metal workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 metal workshop typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with black trim and open bay revealing a workshop, pickup truck parked nearby

16×20 Metal Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Golden metal shed with black roll-up door and window overlooking a mountain valley

16×20 Storage Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Small property owners use this footprint to clear out the basement and the cramped.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Regular Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 storage shed.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Small property owners use this footprint to clear out the basement and the cramped wood shed in one move. Lawn equipment storage at this size handles a riding mower, push mower, snowblower, two trimmers, and shelving along all four walls. 8-foot legs keep the kit price near the $5,650 floor.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 storage shed cost?

A 16×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 storage shed?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 storage shed typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Golden metal shed with black roll-up door and window overlooking a mountain valley

16×20 Storage Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

16×20 Backyard Home Office

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers buy a 16×20 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut it. 320 square.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Panels
  • French Doors
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 backyard home office.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers buy a 16×20 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut it. 320 square feet leaves room for a desk wall, conference seating for two clients, a printer cabinet, and a mini-split HVAC. Insulated panels and a French door make it feel like an actual office, not a shed.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 backyard home office cost?

A 16×20 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 backyard home office?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 backyard home office typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

16×20 Backyard Home Office

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Hobby Room / She-Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She-Shed·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Skylights
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 hobby room / she-shed.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑16′ × 20′ · 320 ground + loft

Hobby Room / She-Shed layout.

Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated retreat away from the house. The 16-foot width fits a Peloton plus a yoga zone, or a long quilting table with two storage walls. Wainscoting and Barn Red trim turn the steel exterior into curb appeal, not eyesore.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room / She-Shed works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She-Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She-Shed spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She-Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she-shed
Everyday hobby room / she-shed
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she-shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 hobby room / she-shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She-Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She-Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She-Shed also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She-Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed cost?

A 16×20 hobby room / she-shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 hobby room / she-shed typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She-Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

16×20 Pool House

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners use 16×20 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and covered outdoor.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Half Enclosure
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 pool house.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners use 16×20 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and covered outdoor lounge in one structure. Half enclosure plus a 12-foot lean-to gives shaded patio space without permitting a separate cabana. Pewter Gray with White trim is the popular combo.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Pool House, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 pool house cost?

A 16×20 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 pool house?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 pool house typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

16×20 Pool House

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Garden Shed with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Gardeners running raised beds and a small orchard need more than a 16×20.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Lean-To·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$4,450
16×20
this size
$5,400
16×24
longer
$6,300
18×20
wider
$5,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Roof
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Lean-To
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-GARDEN-SHED-LEANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 garden shed with lean-to.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Lean-To layout.

Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Gardeners running raised beds and a small orchard need more than a 16×20 plastic shed. 320 sq ft holds a potting bench, two wall-length tool racks, bagged soil pallets, and a wheelbarrow with room to maneuver. Add a 6-foot lean-to for tractor or UTV cover.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Lean-To works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with lean-to
Everyday garden shed with lean-to
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
garden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 garden shed with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to cost?

A 16×20 garden shed with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed and Equipment Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$4,450
16×20
this size
$5,400
16×24
longer
$6,300
18×20
wider
$5,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-TOOL-SHED-EQUIPMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments hung on the wall. 12-foot legs clear roll cages and ROPS bars. The 16-by-24 metal building footprint is the smallest that handles full-size lawn and garden equipment with a workbench.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed and Equipment Storage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed and equipment storage
Everyday tool shed and equipment storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed and equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
tool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed and Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed and Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage cost?

A 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20ATV and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall.

You’re viewing:ATV and Toy Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Anchored Concrete
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-ATV-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 atv and toy storage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

ATV and Toy Storage layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall for gear, life jackets, and a fuel cabinet. A 16×20 roll-up handles trailered loads without tilting masts or windshields.

💡 Pro tip:ATV and Toy Storage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv and toy storage
Everyday atv and toy storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv and toy storage + seasonal storage
atv and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 atv and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 atv and toy storage cost?

A 16×20 atv and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 atv and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 atv and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 atv and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 atv and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 atv and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 atv and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 atv and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle Garage and Workshop·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulation Ready
  • Walk-In Door
  • Window Kit
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-MOTORCYCLE-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop layout.

Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size after outgrowing a 16×20. 320 square feet holds the lift, a parts washer, an air compressor, and four bikes parked diagonally. Insulated panels keep winter wrenching tolerable.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle Garage and Workshop works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle garage and workshop
Everyday motorcycle garage and workshop
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle garage and workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
motorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle Garage and Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle Garage and Workshop also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop cost?

A 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle garage and workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Carport with Storage Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Buyers who want vehicle cover plus a locked storage room split the 16×20 carport kit.

You’re viewing:Carport with Storage Bay·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Open Front
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-CARPORT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 carport with storage bay.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Carport with Storage Bay layout.

Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Buyers who want vehicle cover plus a locked storage room split the 16×20 carport kit into a 16×20 open bay and a 16×20 enclosed end. One car parks under cover; the back room locks down tools, tires, and yard equipment. Cheapest configuration on this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Carport with Storage Bay works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport with Storage Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport with Storage Bay spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport with Storage Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday carport with storage bay
Everyday carport with storage bay
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport with storage bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport with storage bay + seasonal storage
carport with storage bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 carport with storage bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport with Storage Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport with Storage Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport with Storage Bay also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport with Storage Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 carport with storage bay cost?

A 16×20 carport with storage bay from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 carport with storage bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport with storage bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 carport with storage bay?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport with storage bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 carport with storage bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 carport with storage bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 carport with storage bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 carport with storage bay.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 carport with storage bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 carport with storage bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 carport with storage bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 carport with storage bay typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport with Storage Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building storefront with large windows and covered side entry

16×20 Small Business Storefront

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Small Business Storefront | Steel and Stud, From $6,600

12

16×20 Small Business Storefront
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Small Business Storefront

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Small Business Storefront, engineered for code-compliant business use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space. Storefront windows on the 16-foot face, a walk-in door, and wainscoting in two-tone color give it the small-shop look without ground-up.

You’re viewing:Small Business Storefront·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$5,650
16×20
this size
$6,600
16×24
longer
$7,500
18×20
wider
$7,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • Certified Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SMALL-BUSINESS-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 small business storefront.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Small Business Storefront layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space. Storefront windows on the 16-foot face, a walk-in door, and wainscoting in two-tone color give it the small-shop look without ground-up construction. IBC-stamped where required.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Storefront works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Small Business Storefront in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Storefront.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Storefront spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Storefront.

DAILY USEEveryday small business storefront
Everyday small business storefront
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business storefront.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business storefront + seasonal storage
small business storefront + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Small Business Storefront, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 small business storefront is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Storefront shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Small Business Storefront buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Small Business Storefront

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Storefront · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Storefront also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Storefront questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 small business storefront cost?

A 16×20 small business storefront from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 small business storefront price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business storefront ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 small business storefront?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business storefront different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 small business storefront need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 small business storefront delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 small business storefront without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 16×20 small business storefront.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 small business storefront?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 small business storefront in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×20 small business storefront meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Storefront quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building storefront with large windows and covered side entry

16×20 Small Business Storefront

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench layout.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped and a 18×35 feels excessive. You park one full-size F-150 or SUV, then keep the back 8 feet for a workbench, tool wall, and a small parts shelf. Plenty of room to walk around the truck with the doors open.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists layout.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house. 630 sq ft handles a table saw, drill press, router table, dust collection, and a 6-foot workbench with shelving overhead. A 36-inch walk-in door keeps deliveries clean.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 home office and hobby room.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Home Office and Hobby Room layout.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully insulated detached office. R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a mini-split HVAC unit, and a partition wall give you a 18×35 office plus a 18×35 hobby space. Storefront windows let in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office and Hobby Room works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×35 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 home office and hobby room typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility trailer, plus shelving for fuel cans, blowers, trimmers, and chainsaws. A double-wide barn door makes loading and unloading fast.

💡 Pro tip:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor plus a brush hog, box blade, and tiller along the back wall. Optional lean-to adds outdoor covered space for round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the.

You’re viewing:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Collector-Grade
  • Polished Concrete OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the vehicle.

💡 Pro tip:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car and motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car and motorcycle showroom
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car and motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a collector car and motorcycle showroom to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,150

12

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$9,300
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
20×35
wider
$12,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 small business inventory storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 630 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 18×35 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×35 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open equipment bays and blue tractor inside, vertical panel metal building

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,150

12

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×35 as a.

You’re viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$9,300
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
20×35
wider
$12,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Theft-Resistant
  • Keypad Entry
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage layout.

Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×35 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit. The 12-gauge frame upgrade plus locking walk-in door and roll-up combo gives you fast load-in and theft resistance. Stamped drawings keep you compliant with county code.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor job-site tool and material storage
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?

A 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open equipment bays and blue tractor inside, vertical panel metal building

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $164,750

12

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$187,800$164,750SAVE $23,050
or $3432/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$164,750$187,800Save $23,050
or as low as $3432/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$146,450
100×90
this size
$164,750
100×100
longer
$174,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3432/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3432/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $164,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3432/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3432/month on a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×90 Manufacturing Floor

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $167,000

12

100×90 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space. Column-free 10,9000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
100×100
longer
$176,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $68,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 manufacturing floor.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Floor layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space. Column-free 10,9000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without secondary structural work.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 manufacturing floor cost?

A 100×90 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×90 Manufacturing Floor

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×90 Distribution Hub

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud, From $166,600

12

100×90 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Distribution Hub

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Distribution Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×90 distribution hub? At 9000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Built for high-throughput logistics: dock-leveler-ready openings on the long wall, drive-through bay.

You’re viewing:Distribution Hub·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×100
longer
$176,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 distribution hub.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Looking for a 100×90 distribution hub? At 9000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Distribution Hub layout.

Looking for a 100×90 distribution hub? At 9000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Built for high-throughput logistics: dock-leveler-ready openings on the long wall, drive-through bay configurations, and clear height for forklifts to stack pallets four high. Pairs naturally with a side lean-to for trailer staging.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Hub works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Distribution Hub, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 distribution hub cost?

A 100×90 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 distribution hub price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 distribution hub?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 distribution hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×90 Distribution Hub

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Rust-toned commercial metal building retail storefront with glass entry and desert mountain backdrop

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail | Steel and Stud, From $166,600

12

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Commercial Showroom / Retail

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial showroom / retail space. Auto, RV, boat, or equipment dealership floors that need 10,9000 sq ft of column-free display. Storefront glazing, customer-facing.

You’re viewing:Commercial Showroom / Retail·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×100
longer
$176,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Storefront Glazing
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 commercial showroom / retail.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial showroom / retail space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Commercial Showroom / Retail layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial showroom / retail space. Auto, RV, boat, or equipment dealership floors that need 10,9000 sq ft of column-free display. Storefront glazing, customer-facing finishes, and engineered roof loads for branded signage and HVAC equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Showroom / Retail works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom / Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom / Retail spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom / Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom / retail
Everyday commercial showroom / retail
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom / retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 commercial showroom / retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom / Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Showroom / Retail · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom / Retail also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom / Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail cost?

A 100×90 commercial showroom / retail from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 commercial showroom / retail price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 commercial showroom / retail.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 commercial showroom / retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 commercial showroom / retail in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 commercial showroom / retail meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom / Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Rust-toned commercial metal building retail storefront with glass entry and desert mountain backdrop

100×90 Commercial Showroom / Retail

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal carport with open bays covering an RV, pickup trucks, boat and tractor

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud, From $166,600

12

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×100
longer
$176,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $62,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

RV BAYDaily Driver100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · tall walls

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory layout.

Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers, marine boats, and recreational equipment. 18 to 20 feet of leg clearance accommodates the tallest fifth wheels with rooftop AC units.

💡 Pro tip:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal carport with open bays covering an RV, pickup trucks, boat and tractor

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud, From $164,750

12

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$187,800$164,750SAVE $23,050
or $3432/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. 10,9000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline.

You’re viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$164,750$187,800Save $23,050
or as low as $3432/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$146,450
100×90
this size
$164,750
100×100
longer
$174,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 90′ · 9,000 ground + loft

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports layout.

Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. 10,9000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline run-out, two practice fields for soccer or lacrosse, batting cages with overhead clearance, or a CrossFit-style training floor with rigs along the long wall.

💡 Pro tip:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3432/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3432/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $164,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3432/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3432/month on a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $165,400

12

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$188,550$165,400SAVE $23,150
or $3446/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Agricultural Processing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×90 agricultural processing facility packs 9000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hay barn, grain processing, cold storage, dairy operations, or large-equipment housing for.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$165,400$188,550Save $23,150
or as low as $3446/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$147,100
100×90
this size
$165,400
100×100
longer
$175,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 agricultural processing facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×90 agricultural processing facility packs 9000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Agricultural Processing Facility layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×90 agricultural processing facility packs 9000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hay barn, grain processing, cold storage, dairy operations, or large-equipment housing for combines and grain trucks. Heavy-gauge framing supports rooftop conveyors, ventilation fans, and industrial wash-down systems.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Processing Facility works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3446/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3446/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 100×90 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $165,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3446/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3446/month on a 100×90 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$165,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×90 Agricultural Processing Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$165,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door under rocky peaks at dusk

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×26 when a basic 18×26 feels cramped.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench layout.

Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×26 when a basic 18×26 feels cramped and a 18×26 feels excessive. You park one full-size F-150 or SUV, then keep the back 8 feet for a workbench, tool wall, and a small parts shelf. Plenty of room to walk around the truck with the doors open.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door under rocky peaks at dusk

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Silver metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door below wooded bluffs

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists layout.

Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house. 468 sq ft handles a table saw, drill press, router table, dust collection, and a 6-foot workbench with shelving overhead. A 36-inch walk-in door keeps deliveries clean.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Silver metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door below wooded bluffs

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and windows by a mountain lake

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and windows by a mountain lake

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×26 into a fully.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 home office and hobby room.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Home Office and Hobby Room layout.

Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×26 into a fully insulated detached office. R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a mini-split HVAC unit, and a partition wall give you a 18×26 office plus a 18×26 hobby space. Storefront windows let in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office and Hobby Room works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×26 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 home office and hobby room typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Rust colored metal carport sheltering a pickup truck and UTV beside a mountain lake

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $7,550

12

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×26 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$7,550
18×28
longer
$8,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×26 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility trailer, plus shelving for fuel cans, blowers, trimmers, and chainsaws. A double-wide barn door makes loading and unloading fast.

💡 Pro tip:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Rust colored metal carport sheltering a pickup truck and UTV beside a mountain lake

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel building workshop with open roll-up bay revealing a UTV, tool benches, and American flag

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $7,550

12

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 468 sq ft holds the tractor.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$7,550
18×28
longer
$8,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 468 sq ft holds the tractor plus a brush hog, box blade, and tiller along the back wall. Optional lean-to adds outdoor covered space for round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel building workshop with open roll-up bay revealing a UTV, tool benches, and American flag

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop auto detailing bay with black pickup truck on wet concrete

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the.

You’re viewing:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Collector-Grade
  • Polished Concrete OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the vehicle.

💡 Pro tip:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car and motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car and motorcycle showroom
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car and motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a collector car and motorcycle showroom to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop auto detailing bay with black pickup truck on wet concrete

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart